Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

Germany. Add basic MEP elements. electrical panels. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as duct. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. such as mechanical equipment. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and piping. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing fixtures. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Add more detailed modelling elements. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. fixtures. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. 3 . electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Create schedules. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. however. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. and tags. views. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. On the Contents tab. When you install the training files as instructed. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. So. to provide a richer and more finished design. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you can choose to save your work. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. when you add ductwork. Create detail views. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. After completing each exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. such as templates and families. Metric file names have an _m suffix. templates. as well as how to open and save them. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. You do not design entire systems. Contact your CAD manager for more information. NOTE Depending on your installation. In this exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and sheets to document the project. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. When you open a training file.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. annotations. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. you learn where the training files are located. For example. is located and accessed in the training files location. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. However. Metric: files for users working with metric units. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials .

For File name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. For Files of type. and you can open any supported file type. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.rvt. a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 4 Click the training file name. the Open dialog displays. 3 In the right pane. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. Accessing Training Files | 5 . scroll down. and click Open. For example. 8 If you have made changes. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. verify that Project Files (*. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt and make changes.rvt) is selected. enter the new file name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. if you open settings. double-click Imperial or Metric. you are prompted to save the changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. and click Save. click ➤ Save As. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click the Training Files icon. select the folder in which to save the new file.

6 .

If you move the partition. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. hence. the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In the Revit MEP model. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. schedules. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the parameter is one of association or connection. the hierarchy of elements. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawing sheets. sections. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the floor or roof remains connected. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. If the length of the elevation is changed. In this case. drawings. every drawing sheet. the door retains this relationship to the partition. ■ ■ 7 . the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. scope. You learn the terminology. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. quantities. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and phases when you need it. and plans.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. They help to describe or document the design. For example. tags. walls and ceilings are hosts. tags. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and electrical panels. Datum elements help to define project context. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . dimensions. boilers. For example. sprinklers. For example. When you change something. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ducts. and electrical panels. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. filled regions. levels. sprinklers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and 2D detail components. For example. ducts. and keynotes are annotation elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and reference planes are datum elements. dimensions. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. grids. boilers. sinks. sinks.

floors. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. top of wall. This information includes components used to design the model. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. views of the project. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. The project file contains all information for the building design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. such as roofs. and ceilings. However. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. By using a single project file. for example. and drawings of the design. from geometry to construction data. section views. programming is not required. For example.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you must be in a section or elevation view. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. first floor. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you do nothing to establish these relationships. you can explicitly control them. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. and types. North . If you can draw. Project: In Revit MEP. In other cases. and so forth). industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. or bottom of foundation. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Most often. schedules.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. elevation views. In Revit MEP. families. To place levels. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Often. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals.

A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and wires. System families include ducts. A type can be a specific size of a family. and similar graphical representation. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . However. For example. identical use. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. pipes. You can also display several project views at one time. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as a 30” X 42” title block. A type can also be a style. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. System families can be transferred between projects. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. hiding. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. For example. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Type: Each family can have several types. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. showing. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Unlike system and standard component families. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Then experiment with them. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. With a few clicks.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. each in-place family contains only a single type. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions.

The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To return the panel to the ribbon.

There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. project and system parameters. and CAD files.. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for managing and modifying the current view. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and settings. select the tool first. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools. data and systems.. then select what you want to modify. and for switching views. tools used for editing existing elements.

A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. By default. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). provides requested information. displays frequently used tools. when adding duct. closes the application menu (double-click). an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. For example. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides access to common tools. To keep a panel expanded.

(Save As) export the current drawing. select a template and create a new drawing.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. click. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ... (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. such as Export and Publish.. select a file to open. (Export) On the application menu.

saves a current project. To enable or disable a tool item. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. and Walkthrough. family. to. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation.. click. family. but is not enabled by default. Camera. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.. (Licensing) close the file. or template file. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.On the application menu. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. publish the current project. (Publish) print the current drawing.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . provides views including Default 3D. annotation.. (Print) access product and license information.

items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. repeat the command. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Group. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Clipboard. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . To hide the Status Bar. when you switch to another editing mode. Starting with the most recent command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. However. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or the Family Editor. displaying the same information. When you are using a command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Modify. This displays the command history in a list. check the Status Bar. When you are highlighting an element or component. workshared components. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type.To undo or redo a series of operations. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. In addition. Clear the Status Bar check mark. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. To show the Status Bar again. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar.

for example. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Place a Wall. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . When you place an element in a drawing. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. click (Modify).

For example. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. click Training Files. In the following steps.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

Modifying the View | 19 . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. To modify or add snap increments. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. When you release the mouse button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. In the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 6 Click in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. on the Navigation bar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click . The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.

To define settings for SteeringWheels. press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. moving the wheel to the desired location. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. For more information about SteeringWheels.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse. click the SteeringWheels tab. 14 To exit the wheel. Click and drag to orbit the design. ➤ Options. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. bottoms. After you are familiar with these tasks.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. These are the drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design. called drag controls. display along the ends. Similar controls. 2 Enter ZR. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . referred to as shape handles. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Small blue dots. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. and select the duct.HVAC Plan . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and open Level 2 .

Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked.3 Click and drag the bottom control. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the Undo command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 6 On the Undo menu. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. select the first item in the list.

In this case. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. After selecting the element to move. you want to move the duct. Some commands. for example. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 11 With the duct already selected. and drag it to the left as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. such as Move and Copy. click to specify the starting position. 10 Move the cursor to the right.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click again to specify the ending position. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . as shown.

15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 13 To end a command. Press ESC twice. For example. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands. 14 Enter VG.Return. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Supply. Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Select Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

use copy/monitor. select Project. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. under Template file. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You can either select a template from the template library. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. New projects inherit all the families. such as coordination review and interference checking. 27 . and loadable families. link files. system families. and geometry from the starting template. 6 Click OK. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. settings. You can choose from several templates. and modify system settings. create and manage views. click Training files. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. such as the default project units and settings. Finally. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as ducts and pipes. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it.rte template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and click Open. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. In that case. the default building levels and standard views. click Browse. 5 In the New Project dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. under Create new. you learn how to start a project from a template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.

navigate to Imperial Templates. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Click OK twice. When you select the material. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 8 In the drawing area. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. for City. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click (Browse). create another new project using the Construction template. for Energy Data. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. ■ For Building Construction. 10 Using the same method. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. under Energy Analysis. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. and open North. select School or University. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules.7 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In the Choose Template dialog. click Edit. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. click Browse. you can select it now. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. For example. select Project template. For Location. Click Cancel. ■ ■ Under Create new. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. (Browse). select Manchester. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Click OK.rte template and click Open. NH. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. review the construction materials listed. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. If you want to use a template other than the default.

Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 22 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. 25 In the left pane. After standard settings have been established for an organization. power distribution systems. and fire protection systems. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 1/2". and 5 1/2". 4 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 3/4". wiring.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. plumbing. click Round. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. For Categories. piping. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 10 1/2". 11 1/2". Click OK twice. for 3 1/2". 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Views. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Rectangular.rfa and click Open. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. under Pipe Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Identity Data. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 5 1/2". select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and demand factors for electrical systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. click Sizes. Holding CTRL. 33 Click OK. click Wiring. 26 In the right pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 24 In the right pane. 27 Click OK. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. and 12 1/2". for 3 1/2". 23 In the left pane.

2 In the New Project dialog. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. From the Positioning list. For Then by. families. click Training. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. To enable this coordination. select Auto . For Then by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . under Template file. select Sub-Discipline. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.rvt. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Associated Level. select View Name.Origin to Origin. Linking Projects In this exercise. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. sheets. and groups that are contained in a project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. click Browse. In addition. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Project. select Family and Type. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 38 Close the file. Click Open. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. For Sort by. under Create new. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Notice that the file is saved as a template.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

or families. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click My Library. Load. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. templates. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click (Add Value). and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click Open. ➤ Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Save.11 In the Places dialog. and change the name to My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click OK twice. click the My Library icon.

click Edit. 3 Under Settings. If you work in a large office. 2 In the Options dialog. such as bump maps. 20 Click ➤ Options. specify the new location here. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 27 Click OK. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click Places. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. select Ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 19 Click Cancel. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click OK. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 11 In the Options dialog. view the current path. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. If you want to relocate this path. 21 On the File Locations tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. This path is determined during installation. 5 In the text editor. 22 Select My Library. and decal image files. 14 Click in the drawing area. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. custom color files. 9 In the text editor.

As you zoom in and out within a view. 4 In the New Project dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. 23 In the text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog. 19 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. under Dimension Snaps. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Browse. click Training Files. click OK. 22 In the text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Edit. 6 In the Snaps dialog. work with snapping turned off. you modify snap settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 18 Click ➤ Options. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.. click the Spelling tab. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Close. under Template file. you modify snap increments. In this exercise. 20 Under Settings. click Restore Defaults. click File menu ➤ Save. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. and enter 1 . 25 Close the file without saving it. You can turn snap settings on and off. delete sheetmtl-CU.rte. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.17 In the Spelling dialog.

TIP To zoom while sketching. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If it does not. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. 8 In the Snaps dialog. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. deselect Chain. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. zoom out until it does so. click OK. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. While sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. snapping reverts to the system default settings. For example. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. such as ZO to zoom out.7 Under Object Snaps. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. use the wheel button on your mouse. enter SM. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and move the cursor to the right. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.

17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and specify the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Click OK. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and the wall edges. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. with or without saving it. If you move the cursor along the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 19 Enter SM. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 26 Close the file. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 22 Move the cursor downward.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and delete the value 1’ . Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Do not set the wall end point.. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and move the cursor to the right. it will snap to the endpoints.

43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. If the tutorial training files are not present. water source heat pump (WSHP). Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 45 . In this exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. At the end of the tutorial. After finishing each exercise. This system consists of a cooling tower. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. As you create the mechanical system. After applying a color scheme to the zones. By following the recommended workflow. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. duct system and a hydronic piping system. and then you create a plenum level.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However. you will understand the process. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. methodology. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you can choose to save your work.autodesk. In this lesson. go to http://www. you first configure the linked architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you first plan the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.

3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. roof. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. In this section. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. not in the MEP training file. click to select it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i.Space Plan is highlighted. select Room Bounding.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a level for plenums. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. These components are defined in the architectural training file. and click OK. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. ceilings. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. under Constraints. NOTE When working with a linked file. 1 In the Project Browser. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

enter 8'. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. The new level is placed. Click Plan View Types. 16 Press Esc. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks.6 In the Project Browser.MEP. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 On the Draw panel. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and click OK. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and double-click West . For Offset.

for View Scale. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Sub-Discipline. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. select MEP .Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. select Design. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. click Edit. and click Apply Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you can choose to save your work. Under View Depth. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Under Identity Data. Under Extents. for Top. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.Plenum. you place spaces in areas of the building model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. enter an Offset of 1' 0". right-click Level 2 Plenum.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Properties. NOTE After finishing each exercise. select Plenum Plan. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. for Default View Template. for View Range. and for Offset. ■ Click OK twice. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . For View Classification. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Level Above (Level 3). for Level. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. In the next exercise. For Cut plane. However. enter 0. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. select Horizontal. For Space. enter 0. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit.rvt. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select New. and ceilings). For (Tag Location). and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. select Level 2 Plenum. indicating that it’s the active view. Placing Spaces | 49 . walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . enter Library. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.7 Click to place the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. enter 219. 14 In the drawing area. For Name. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ensuring coordination between the files.

change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. and then click Modify. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Upper Limit. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. enter 0. For Offset. select Level 3.

under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area.

indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 0. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.rvt. and then press Esc. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level 3. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Space Plan is highlighted. for Upper Limit.

11 Close the schedule view. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.7 In the Project Browser. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 9 In the floor plan. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and press Enter. 10 Using the same method. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. enter Corridor. change the space number to 216A. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and scroll to the newly placed space. as shown. which was numbered 219Q. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. double-click the space name. the plan view would have updated with the changes. In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.

15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously.

Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). click Training Files.rvt. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

4 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 4'. select Level 3. for Upper Limit. For Offset. and then click OK. right-click. On the Options Bar. enter 0. expand Spaces. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Upper Limit. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Limit Offset. 6 Enter VG. In the plan view. select the space. select Interior and Reference. 10 In the plan view. enter 225PC. click in the chase area to place the space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 12 Click in the section view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. Under Identity Data. For Number. select Roof Level. enter Chase. for Name. but that the space does not fill the entire chase.

Bounding elements (such as walls. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. ceilings. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and maximize the view.Space Plan. under Loaded Tags. 15 Press Esc. 17 Type ZF. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. floors. select Space Tag With Volume. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next exercises. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. All spaces in the view are tagged.

verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. under Spaces. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. To display space reference lines. which removes the space from the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click View ➤ Zones. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click Training Files. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. After a space is placed in an area. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . In this exercise. click Reference. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. it is automatically added to the Default zone.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Notice that Default is currently the only zone.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning is highlighted.

under Energy Analysis. As you do this. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to a zone. and modify the zone properties.rvt.5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. select Occupiable. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the drawing area. indicating that the space is occupiable. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and Electrical 220 spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Computer Lab 222. indicating that it’s the active view. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The Zone tool is active. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Finish Editing Zone. and a new zone is created. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Using the Edit Zone tab. The graphic in the System Browser updates. the Edit Zone tab displays. Next. you assign spaces to zones in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Instruction 221.

select HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you need to activate the zone visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. Click OK. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Instruction. Expand HVAC Zones. type VG. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 5 With the drawing area active. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.

West . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. You activated zone visibility in the views. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). click Finish Editing Zone. click Training Files. 11 Close the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Name.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Zoning. 9 In the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click OK. enter 2 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. In this exercise. click Reference. under Identity Data. and verify the zone in the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Zoning is highlighted. under Spaces. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.West . expand 2 .Area B. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. zoom out. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .5 Click in the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Level 2 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 15 Press Esc. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. Select Attached End. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 8 In the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view to activate it. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view.

double-click Level 1 . 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. enter Lounge .rvt. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zone information. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.East. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. for Name Value. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. you verify the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. click the corner where the Top. on the ViewCube. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. In this exercise. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. space. Front. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.Zoning to make it the active view. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . double-click the zone tag. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.

you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. you isolate the space. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Using the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. verify that Wireframe is selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). click (Isolate). Next. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Click (Highlight). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. and select 109 Lounge. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Electrical Loads. click . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Construction Type. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. scroll down in the left pane. the space information displays for the selected space. and then click OK. verify that <Building> is selected. and then click OK. select 1_South_Lounge. All spaces in the zone display in isolation.■ On the Details tab. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Next. For People. click . select 109 Lounge. and in the People dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types.

heating air temperature. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : N/A is specified. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and air changes per hour. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .00 °F : 54. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. This indicates the outdoor air per person. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. outdoor air per area. Below the list of spaces and zones. click (Shading). View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. verify that 70. Next. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. cooling air temperature. and humidification set point.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. and dehumidification set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and other room-bounding components. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This indicates the cooling set point. roofs. For Heating Information. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. For Cooling Information. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that 74.00 °F : 90. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. floors.

15 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. select Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Offset. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. For Name. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Click OK. enter 212P. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Cancel. select Level 3. enter 0. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Energy Analysis. for Number. Because this is an unoccupied space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. open MEP .

23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and verify that the space has replaced the void. click in the Value field. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. select School or University. for City. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. you verified building. for Energy Data. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. For Postal Code. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Manchester. On the Place tab. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.rvt. space. enter 03101.Space Plan. under Energy Analysis. click Edit. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Training Files. For Location.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . is selected. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and select space Plenum 212P. NH. double-click Level 2 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and zone information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.

verify that <Building> is specified. For Sensible. and enter 50 sq. verify that Level 1 is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Under Heat Gain (per Person). In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select Library . verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). both. If. or neither. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. select Heated and cooled. For Project Phase. For Export Complexity.Audio Visual. Select Area per person. enter 150 Btu/h. and click OK. for Values. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. for Values. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. enter 200 Btu/h. 8 In the drawing area. a cooling load. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. ft. For People. click Edit. For Building Construction. select Specified. select Specified. In order to select a space. and click OK. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK twice. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and then click . verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and click Element Properties. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Ground Plane. select space Library 219. under Volume Computations. For Latent. ■ On the Weather tab. and click OK. this option adjusts the times automatically. click in the Value column. for Building Service.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that 1' 0" is specified. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. right-click. verify that New Construction is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. you need to select this option. For Space Type. For Condition Type.

If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. is specified. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Next. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that Manchester. There should be no warnings displayed. for Values. For Building Service. 12 Click the Details tab. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Click OK twice. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . You should correct the space error in the building model. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. NH. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click Calculate. and under Heating Information. For Electrical Loads. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. click Information). (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. You have verified the building information. select 219 Library. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click OK. Under Power. and can be modified here. for Values. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Actual. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. click Edit. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. Select the space associated with the warning. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and click to learn the cause for the warning. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Actual. For Building Construction. verify that <Building> is specified. For Location.■ ■ ■ Click OK. verify that School or University is selected.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 19 In the drawing area. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and a loads report displays. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 17 In the loads report. Click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.rvt. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. or make any changes to the model. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. In this exercise. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. weather. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. space. 16 After you review the loads report. or zone information. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. under Energy Analysis.Space Plan. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. indicating that it’s the active view. For Color Scheme. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the drawing area. space. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. select HVAC Zones. click Training Files. 15 Review the loads report for project. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and zone information for the building model. 21 Click OK. select 219 Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value.5 Zoom in to the legend. The new scheme displays in the view. under Schemes. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend. and click OK. in 1-ton increments.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces.rvt. for Select available fields from. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Select Schedule building components. Click OK. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Training Files. more category options are available. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Name. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building.Space Fill is the active view. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select New Construction. enter Space Airflow Schedule. In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. For Phase.12 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.

Click OK. and Blank line. enter Airflow Delta. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Number. select Calculated Supply Airflow. and then click . In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. Header. select HVAC. click (Browse). For Discipline. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. ■ Click Calculated Value. enter . select Air Flow. and click OK. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Ascending. select Airflow Delta.■ Under Available fields. select Not Between. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. for Formula. select Level.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. and then click Conditional Format. select Level. For Formula. For Then by. For Type. Select Formula.

Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the next lesson. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. verify that Show is highlighted. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. a view opens that contains the selected space. In this exercise. For Background Color. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Click OK twice. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. and click OK. click the color swatch. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. In the Color dialog. In later exercises. select red. right-click to access schedule properties. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Under Conditions to Use. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.■ ■ ■ For Value. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. ■ The schedule displays. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 .

78 .

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After completing the air systems lesson. you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. Then. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will create supply air systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 79 . As you place the air terminals. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and scroll to space 223. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. When you highlight a space using the cursor.

enter 425 CFM. select the diffuser. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. type 12. and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and press Enter. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck . verify that Constrain is cleared. and select Supply Diffuser . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. If the host element is modified or moved. 13 On the Options Bar. click Place on Face. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Also. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 9 On the Placement panel. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . the hosted elements are updated as well.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 17 Move the cursor down. and then press Esc to end the command. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and then select both Copy and Multiple. for Flow.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. The schedule updates with the new flow data.

clear Leader. 25 In the drawing area. As you place the return diffusers. Next. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. as shown.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. 28 On the Placement tab. click Yes. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 27 Select Return Diffuser .rfa. 24 In the Open dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. and then press Esc. 21 On the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers. and click Open. 22 In the drawing area. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 29 Place 2 diffusers.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click to select the lines. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference. as shown. select one of the return diffusers. and click OK. Level. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. click Yes. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. under Other. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Strong Reference.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

■ ■ For the end point. for Constraints ➤ Offset.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and click OK. enter 9' 0"2750. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. For the start point. click the Level 1 line. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

45 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click the title. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Press Esc. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.HVAC Plan . you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. including energy analysis. In this exercise. and click View ➤ Systems. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. You then create the logical connection between the system components. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display.Design is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. indicating that it’s the active view. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. However. After creating the logical connection. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. When you highlight a space. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.

select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. As you add diffusers to systems. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 12 In the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. System Name. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Connect Into. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click Cancel. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and Flow value. review the Number of Elements. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. the number of elements is updated. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 11 In the drawing area. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. On the Options Bar.

NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. under Identity Data. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for Mark. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 18 Click OK.17 Using the method learned previously. 25 Click OK. In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. the air terminals are the children. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 22 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for System Name. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical. In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Rename the system Next. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. and the system connects them.

click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. A Generate Layout tab displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Solution Type. Also. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Plan.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. select the upper left diffuser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. the Network type provides several solutions. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). which provides various layout tools. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. and display solution 1. select Network. In this case. 4 In the drawing area.

you’ll get an error in a later step. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Round. For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Offset. Click OK. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as shown. For Offset. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. click Modify. Select Branch. click Settings. For Duct Type. For Duct Type. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. enter 9' 10 1/2". 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. enter 3'. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . enter 9' 10 1/2".7 On the Options Bar.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . or manually modify the duct. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. For example. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.11 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect.

Using a flow-based color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . thus it is not part of the system.Flow. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. for Color Scheme. select By View. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and click to select it.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. but not all values are used in this view. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. select Duct Color Fill . You can delete ductwork and the system remains. If the entire network does not highlight. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. for Values Displayed. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. fittings. Usually. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. highlight a segment of the main duct. The first time you press Tab. and then click OK. a disconnection exists. under Graphics. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and equipment. and click OK.

21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Airflow. select one of the diffusers in the system. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and on the Options Bar. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and click OK. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 20 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Schemes. and press Enter.Velocity. for Flow. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. under Mechanical . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select the color scheme legend.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM.

The ductwork and fittings are updated. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). select Calculated Size Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. highlight a segment of the duct. and enter . 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select the upper segment of main duct. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. and drag it to the right. Click OK.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and then click to select it. Select Only. for Branch Sizing. Under Constraints.08 in-wg/100ft. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select 16". Select Restrict Height. click Cancel. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.

and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using this tool. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. static pressure.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 35 Click Finish. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.

and click to specify the end of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select the WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

for Offset.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. and click Draw Duct. right-click the connector grip.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.3D MEP. 11 On the Options Bar. double-click MEP . Front. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. NOTE When drawing duct. click the corner where the Top. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the ViewCube. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. select the top right diffuser. select 9' 10 1/2". 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). it is considered a closed loop. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 19 In the drawing area. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 22 Using the same method.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. the color fill indicates the flow value. Also. The ductwork is automatically created. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. You can ignore the warning. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to select it. and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.

verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. such as a plenum. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. for Flow. under Constraints. under Mechanical . clear Restrict Height.Airflow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 40 Using the same method. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select a segment of the main duct. and click OK. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. and a cooling tower located on the roof. including 2 base mounted pumps. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. 109 . Create return and supply piping systems. Then. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.rvt. you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Left Return .HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . and select WSHP . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.High Efficiency .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 7 On the Options Bar.Horizontal .Design is highlighted.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Wall faces is selected.2-6 Tons . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. indicating that it’s the active view. in corridor 328. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

10 Select the WSHP. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.8 Click the corridor wall face. and enter 2'. and click to place the dimension.

17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Offset. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. enter 12 GPM. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. enter 9'.14 Click Modify. and click to place it in the mechanical room. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Under Mechanical. select the 2 WSHPs. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Water Flow.

Create the logical connection between the system components.21 Click Modify. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.

analyses cannot be performed. indicating that it’s the active view. but without a corresponding system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 5 In the System Browser. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Unlike logical connections (systems). 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. where it is easier to review the information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click View ➤ Piping.Design is highlighted. You can create pipes to connect system components. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the Systems column heading. click Training Files. Creating a Piping System | 115 .rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.HVAC Plan .Mech 330). In the left pane of the Open dialog.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.

10 On the Options Bar. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. This display indicates that the system is selected. select the boiler. and the Edit System tool is not active. As you assign equipment to systems. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. for System Name. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select the 2 WSHPs. Notice that on the Options Bar. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. while pressing Ctrl.

(You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. under Design ➤ HVAC . Creating a Piping System | 117 .Design. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. for System Name. double-click Roof . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.13 Click Finish Editing System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You have created the hydronic return system. 17 On the Options Bar. and select the cooling tower. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.

IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and click Select. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In heating mode. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 29 Right-click CHWS. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and click Expand All. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.22 In the Select Connector dialog. and bypasses the cooling tower. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 25 Select the boiler. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Return system category. indicating the logical connection. In cooling mode. 23 Close the roof plan view. 28 Using the same method. and click OK. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You also manually modify the layout path as required. enter 18 GPM. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click OK. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. under Mechanical. and click Properties. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click Column Settings. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 32 In the System Browser. you can view several parameters. expand Piping. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. for Water Flow.

you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).HVAC plan view range are highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). select CHWR.Design is highlighted. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. indicating that it’s the active view. 10 Click OK. and click to select it. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . press Tab to highlight the system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. the boiler. When you draw a box to select components. 9 In the Select a System dialog. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 5 In the Filter dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. select Mechanical Equipment. then the Select a System dialog displays. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. A system preview displays in red.Mech 330). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. you can place the cursor over a system component. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Check None.

It does not reference the architecture. 13 Click Cancel.11 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . duct. enter 1' 6''. structural beams. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. select Perimeter. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that Solutions is selected. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. click Settings. For Inset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. or architectural components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and press Tab 3 times. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally. the flow for one WSHP is 18. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.16 Click Finish Layout. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 19 In the drawing area. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and the flow for the other is 12. With each Tab. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and access its instance properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical. 24 Press Esc. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. under Mechanical.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 On the System Tools panel. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. click Edit System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. which propagates flow throughout the system.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design.HVAC Plan . you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. double-click Level 1 . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Next. Logically.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 32 Click Finish Editing System. you physically close the CHWR loop. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 28 In the Project Browser. the Number of Elements is now 8. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . On the Options Bar.

38 Using the same method. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 35 Using the drag control. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. under Mechanical. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and click Cancel. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. select a WSHP. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. as shown. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. access its instance properties. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.

41 Click OK. enter 1' 6''. Click Settings. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. enter 0''/12''. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Slope. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. and then click OK.40 In the Select a System dialog. For Inset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. select Perimeter 1 of 5.

48 While pressing Ctrl. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 46 Click Modify. 47 In the drawing area.

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.50 Using the same method. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select a different layout solution. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. To create the piping system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. 51 Click Finish Layout. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Add piping to close the supply loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

indicating that it’s the active view. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ 3D Views. double-click 3D HVAC Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and the return pipes are magenta. as shown.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Design is highlighted. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.rvt. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.

as shown. select the section of piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 6 Press Delete.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Click to move the piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.

and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 12 In the 3D view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the lower one is secondary. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The connections are automatically created. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click Draw Pipe. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the boiler. select the return pipe riser.

enter 2'. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and you select 1 connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 1' . You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. for Offset. and press Enter. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. ■ Move the cursor down.7''. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.

it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and click OK. 19 In the plan view. and the appropriate fittings are created. select the primary base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 18 Press Esc twice. and select it. as shown.

and click the minus symbol. click to connect to the pump.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 29 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and when the connector point displays. you select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector. 28 Press Esc. 27 Move the cursor to the right. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 33 Press Esc. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector. enter 4'. for Offset.

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. enter 9' 6''. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. type 1'. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. right-click the bottom control on the tee. for Offset.

You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Next. you validate the flow through the system. and click Element Properties. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.

47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the cooling tower. The flow is being propagated through the piping. and click OK. notice that under Mechanical. under Mechanical. under Mechanical. When you create the pumps in parallel. 41 Using the same method. 48 In the plan view. for Cooling Water Flow. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. and click Element Properties.50 or 50% of the Flow. In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect the cooling tower Next. right-click. 46 Press Esc. as shown. 40 Click Cancel.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 44 In the 3D view. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 43 Press Esc. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. the value is 0 GPM. 42 Click OK. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.

49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and close the dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 In the 3D View. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.rvt. and is heated by the boiler. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). the water bypasses the cooling tower. When the valve is open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.

Adding Valves | 143 . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design is highlighted. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.HVAC Plan . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. as shown.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. and select Ball Valve .

13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method.

validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 19 Using the same method. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 20 Select the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Element Properties.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. In heating mode. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and click OK. right-click. Adding Valves | 145 . verify that Flow is 0 GPM. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. under Mechanical. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. Initially. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.22 Using the method you just learned.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. as shown. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.rvt. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.Design is highlighted.

for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. click Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Pipe Color Fill .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 147 . and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click OK.Size. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Flow. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

select Friction. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and click to select the branch. and for Velocity. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 13 Press Esc. Click OK. and enter 2. Under Constraints. enter 5 FPS. for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Select And. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.25 FT/100ft. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.

Inspecting the System In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Using the System Inspector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select a different layout solution. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. or offset elevations are incorrect. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Inspecting the System | 149 . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.rvt. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. pressure. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.

An inspection flag reports the section number. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This information helps you modify the system design. flow. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

and to size pipe. select 90° F.88 psi. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . the Static Pressure is 7. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. targeting those systems that need attention. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 10 Click Finish. as shown. and the Pressure Loss is 1.67 psi. In this exercise. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. you need to validate them.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and click OK.89 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. for Fluid Temperature. 9 Using the same method. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. inspect Section 6 again. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.

notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Show to view all of the system components. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.rvt. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.Design. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. thus assigning the components to a system. and click View. As you learned when placing components. After you have assigned all components to systems. the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. If you place components without assigning them to a system. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. right-click the Systems titlebar. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). 4 In the System Browser. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. For example. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. In the System Browser. double-click Level 1 . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Warnings display. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 In the System Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you assign components to a system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder.Design. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 9 Right-click CHWS. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and double-click Level 3 . and for pipe sizing. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. click Close. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 12 In the System Browser. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.HVAC Plan . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. otherwise. and confirm unassigned system components.Design floor plan. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and click Expand All.TIP If you have multiple views open. 14 Using the methods that you learned. right-click Hydronic Return. 10 Using the same methods. and select Level 3 . expand the Unassigned folder.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). ■ ■ For Factor. select Wiring Types. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. distribution systems. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. You also add a wiring type. click Training Files. For Temperature Rating. select Copper. ■ ■ For Material.04. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Material. For Temperature. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Select Correction Factor. select Copper. ■ Click New Correction Factor. wiring. expand Wiring .Wire Sizes. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. enter 1. speeding up the design phase. enter THHN. select 90. and demand factors that are applied in the design. As you place components and create circuits. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .rvt. Click OK. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 75.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

for Custom Colors. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .■ ■ For Value. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK three times. Click Background Color.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Then. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. First. power circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create a panel schedule. Use the System Browser to check your design. as you place lighting fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. 167 .Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.

Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting Color Fill view is open. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. You can create additional color schemes.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Average Estimated Illumination. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Under Scheme Definition. for Basic Colors. By using orange as the color for this range. In the Color dialog. for the Spaces Category. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. select the color for Less Than 20.00 fc. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.00 fc. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .rvt. select Orange. select the color legend.

12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.277.7 In the Project Browser. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 13 Click the Level 2 . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . zoom to space Library 219. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling plan.5 fc range. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range is satisfied. The red field will clear once the +/. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. which is the lowest value in the specified range.

170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 23 Click OK. 18 Click to place the fixture. 20 Select the lighting fixture.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. 25 On the Options Bar. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. select Multiple.

select Multiple.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 27 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 36 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. and for Category. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . The lighting delta is satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. select Multiple Alignment. click the ceiling grid line as shown. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command. 46 Close the file with or without saving it.

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Lighting Color Fill plan.Lighting Plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219.

for Color Preset. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. In the Name dialog. select Luminous Flux.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. enter 162. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics.277V and click OK. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . for Lamp. select Xenon and click OK. ■ Click Apply. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. and click OK. enter .00 lm. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ Click OK twice. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Under Electrical. for Ballast Loss Factor. click the value for Light Loss Factor.93. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. select 463T5_S. for Apparent Load.ies and click Open. select T5 [HO]. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. enter .85. for Type Mark. In the Select File dialog. enter F15. click the value for Initial Color. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.00 VA. specify 15000. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.

11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and for Category. Click OK. click Check None. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 In the Filter dialog. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.277V.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219.Press Delete. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

click (Open). and Receptacles | 183 . The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Placing Switches.Press Delete. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. click Training Files. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and receptacles to your design. you add switches. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. In the next exercise. junction boxes. Placing Switches.

it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch.

The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. and Receptacles | 185 .rfa and click Open. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Junction Boxes. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Select Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Placing Switches.

20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Offset. enter JB-1NL. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click OK twice.14 Press ESC to end the command. 21 In the drawing area. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. zoom to space Library 219. for Mark. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 Select the junction box. Click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. NOTE When entering values. for Level 2 . enter 9’0”. note the Number of Poles is 1. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Electrical.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view.

Click OK. Distribution System.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Number of Elements. Expand General. NOTE If necessary. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Voltage. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Space Number. Placing Switches. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Name. 24 For any column. 26 In the System Browser. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 23 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Size. right-click and click Column Settings. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Junction Boxes. Select Load.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 . 38 Select the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Training Files. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.

Click OK. for Max. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter PP-2B. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. 8 Select the panelboard. select 120/208 Wye. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. enter 20. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A.

23 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. and for Category. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. enter LP-2B. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 20 In the drawing area. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . which is the logical connection between the elements. enter 20. zoom to space Instruction 221. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Loads. Click OK. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. click Check None. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 41 In the Filter dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. for Hot Conductors. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. Click OK. enter 2. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and for Category. click Check None.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Click OK. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). select Wires. except without wire. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 38 Press ESC to end the command. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Expand Electrical. right-click on the Systems heading. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and verify that Load. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Rating. Distribution System. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. expand Power. and then expand circuit 1. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 13 In the System Browser. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Voltage. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .rvt. Click OK.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. under Electrical. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. change the Voltage to 277V. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 30 Close the System Browser. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

47 In the drawing area. 40 Click OK twice. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . enter FR4. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit Type. Click Tags. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. for Type Mark. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. click below the first one to place it. under Identity Data. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Click Yes.

Click OK. and for Category. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . select Lighting Fixture Tags. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Next you create a switch system. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Deselect Break and for Suffix. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click Save. Click OK. 56 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Circuit Number. select Break.rfa. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 52 In the Save As dialog. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. enter a comma. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. click Check None. for File Name. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures.

enter a. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.rvt. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. click Training Files. click (Open). Creating a Switch System | 205 . 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.

for switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. under Electrical .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter b. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.

Circuits are used for power. and data systems. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 7 In space Electrical 220. lighting.26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Electrical Fixtures. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the PP-2B panel. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 207 . click Check None. click (Open). Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.rvt. 4 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and for Category. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 2 In the drawing area. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Click OK.

13 Select the wire again. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.Loads. and click Open. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and in the right pane. for Hot Conductors. 19 Click OK. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Wiring. Click OK. enter 2. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select Long Wire Tick Mark.rfa. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . 15 In the Load Family dialog. and in the drawing area. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.

21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 22 In space Electrical 220. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and click to select the circuit. select the PP-2B panel.

as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle.26 Press Delete. 29 In space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 In the drawing area. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

select panel LP-2B. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 3 In the Electrical space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click Training Files. zoom to space Electrical 220.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 2 In the drawing area. click Open.

while Phase B provides 2004 VA. and Phase C . 1-#12. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 1-#12.3616 VA). Under Electrical-Loads. for Rating. enter 30A. Scroll down. click Rebalance Loads. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Click OK. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 6 Click OK.3712 VA. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. B.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#10. 14 Close the warning dialog. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 1-#10. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Phase B 3636 VA. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.

19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. and click OK. for Rating. enter 25A. click Training Files. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click (Open). The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. enter 30A. and click OK. Select PP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Loads.15 Select panel PP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Click OK.rvt. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. under Electrical . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B.Loads.

click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 11 Click OK twice. click Edit. 7 Select the schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. expand Sheets (all). and open E601 .NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 4 Close the report. 5 In the Project Browser.Panel Schedules.rvt. select Bold and Italic. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Header Text. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 3/32. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Header Text. for Font. for Font Size. for Font Size. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Body Text. click Training Files. for Appearance. enter 1/8. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. select Berlin Sans FB. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.

and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. In the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Expand Unassigned. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. Checking Your Design | 215 . 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select space Lounge 212. press TAB once. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.

17 In the drawing area. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 On the Options Bar. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. for Panel. 15 In the dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. under Warnings. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 16 Close the details dialog. select MDP-1. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Plumbing Plan . 219 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate.Sanitary.Design ➤ Floor Plans. type PVC . 2 In the Project Browser.rvt.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. planning is critical to a successful design. and click Properties. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. you create a PVC pipe type. and click OK. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Design is open. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a pipe size. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. in addition to loading existing families. In this exercise.Vent. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. right-click PVC . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and verify that Level 1 . In this lesson. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 4 In the Name dialog. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.

and click Main. Tee.DWV: Standard. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Cross. select Tee Reducing Double Vent .PVC .Vent is listed. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 10°. select Tee. 22 Click New Size. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 6 Click OK. 27 For the new pipe size. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.PVC . for Nominal. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 24 For Inside Diameter. 10 On the Selection panel. enter 5/8''. click Pipe Settings. PVC . enter 27/32''. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter -4' . For Offset. 13 In the right panel. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 17 In the left pane. select Sanitary. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Branch. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . under Mechanical. 18 For System Type.DWV. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.DWV: Standard. click Modify. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.Sch 40 . for Material. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.Sch 40 .5 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Pipe Types. Tap. select Sanitary. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 15 For System Type. select Tee Vent . select Plastic. click Training Files. 25 For Outside. and click OK. 21 In the right pane. 26 Click OK.rfa.0''. In the Project Browser. select None. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.Sch 40 . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 1/2''. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

Create the hot water system. vent. Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. 221 . and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. add a hot water heater. and hot and cold water piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. 1 urinal. click Training Files.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. including the men’s room (space Male 107). you add 2 toilets. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . as shown.

6 gpf.Wall Mounted.Flush Valve . under Water Closet . and 3 sinks.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. against the left wall. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . as shown. in the Type Selector. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 1 wall-mounted urinal. select Public . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 4 On the Element panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 5 On the Placement panel.1.

and press Esc. above the first in the standard toilet space.) 8 Press Esc. (Again. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.Wall Hung. zoom in closer. under Urinal . use the reference line to center the fixture. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.

select 5''x5'' Strainer .Rectangular. 12 On the Placement panel. In placing the fixture. click Place on Face. under Floor Drain . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.2'' Drain. 14 Click Modify.

18 Expand the Unassigned folder. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. a urinal. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and a floor drain. In this exercise. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). click Training Files. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. and review the components listed under this system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i.

6 In the plan view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Plumbing Plan . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and verify that Level 1 .

11 On the Options Bar. enter Sanitary 107. click Finish Editing System. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 12 On the Edit System panel. 13 In the Systems Browser. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You include the bathroom space number in the name. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. If you deselected the drain.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. expand Sanitary. for System Name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors.

16 In the Select a System dialog. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base is placed. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. and click OK. A preview of the piping layout displays. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. for example. select one of the components in the system.

The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click OK. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -4'-0”. select 4''. click Solutions. 23 For Offset. for Solution Type. 21 On Options Bar. select Branch. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select Main. for Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 27 Click Modify. The default settings are automatically modified. enter 1/8'' / 12''. You accept this suggested solution. and click Settings. and modify it to meet project requirements. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Intersections. enter -1' 0''. enter -1' 0''. 24 In the left pane. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Diameter. 26 On the Options Bar. for Slope. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 25 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and for Offset.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. 31 Click Modify. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown.

33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

38 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

select 22''x22'' . in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). under Lavatory . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Design is open.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files.Rectangular.Public. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. 4 On the Element panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. and verify that Level 1 . 5 On the Placement panel. as shown.rvt.

TIP When entering dimensions. select Multiple. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. enter 2' 4''. and press Enter to create a second sink. 8 Select the sink. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. without having to enter ' and '' symbols.

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Finish Editing System. 12 In the drawing area. Press Esc.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 16 On the Edit System panel. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System. 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 22 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views. 19 In the 3D view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.In the System Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and click Draw Pipe. with the tee fitting selected. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 21 Select the tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . double-click 3D Plumbing. 20 Select the fitting.

enter 2' . for Slope. When you press the Spacebar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. press Spacebar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.6''. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 24 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. and click to draw the pipe. and click Apply. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 27 Click Modify. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. In this example. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Offset.

and when the vertical center line displays. select Standard. 32 Select the double wye fitting.PVC . move the cursor over the stub pipe.Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. click to place the fitting. 31 Click Modify.DWV. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 30 In the 3D view. under Wye 45 Deg Double .

zoom in to the double wye fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 37 Select the fitting. enter 1'. In the next steps. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. you add pipe segments to the double wye. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . on the Options Bar. for Offset. and press Enter. 34 Press Esc. right-click the right connector. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 6''.

41 Using the same method. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 40 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown.

draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 48 Click Modify. 49 Using the same method. and press Esc. 46 In the section view. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and click Draw Pipe. 47 Move the cursor down. press Spacebar. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector.

and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.DWV.Sch 40 . 56 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. 54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 55 In the 3D view. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 51 In the Type Selector. under Trap P .PVC . 53 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 58 Using the same method.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. select the left P-Trap. In the plan view. Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Select the double wye pipe on the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click in the plan view..

while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. as shown. and select a proposed solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . On the Routing Solutions panel. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. Press Esc. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. under Pipe Types.■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution.

adjusting the sanitary stack. for Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Training Files. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify the slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.rvt. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.

and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select the elbow fitting on the right. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Sch 40 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the 3D view.Plumbing Plan .Overall. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Draw Pipe. 7 On the Selection panel. as shown. right-click the top connector. click Modify.Design. 5 Select the tee. select the vertical stack.Floor level line. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 9 In the Type Selector.DWV. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click to draw the pipe.PVC . 3 In the Section view. select Standard.Design. and click the intersection to place the fitting.

DWV. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 17 In the Type Selector.11 Click Modify. under Plug . 15 Press Esc. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1'-0”. 18 In the plan view.Sch 40 . for Offset. 12 Select the fitting. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.PVC . as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Click the rotate control once. select Standard.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.19 Click Modify.

and sinks. 15 In the plan view. and click OK. select Pipe Types: Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. For Offset. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 14 In the System Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. 4 In the right pane. select Plumbing Fixtures. and for System Type. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Design ➤ Plumbing . for System Type. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Pipe Types: Water.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. if necessary. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. minimize the Sanitary system. select Branch. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Domestic Cold Water. expand Unassigned. double-click 3D Plumbing . you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. for System Type. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 7 In the left pane. select Main. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 6 In the left pane.Overall. select Branch. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . For Offset. and click Main.Design ➤ 3D Views.) 10 Click OK. urinal. click Check None. 17 In the Filter dialog. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. enter 9' 3''. select Domestic Hot Water. 9 In the left pane. draw a selection box to select the toilets.

indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. enter DCW 107. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 19 On the System Tools panel. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. click Edit System. For Flow Conversion Method. 21 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. In the System Browser. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

under Pipe Types. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 33 Click Modify. as shown. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 0”/12”. 34 In the plan view. select Water. 30 In the plan view. for Offset. and click to place the pipe. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. right-click the top DCW connector. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 3' . enter 7''. and click Draw Pipe. select the sink above the urinal. 36 Move the cursor to the left. For Slope. enter 4'0”. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click the connector. 28 In the Type Selector. select 3/4''. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 37 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and press Enter. 35 In the Type Selector.2 7/8''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.25 Using the same method. connect the second toilet. For Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 10'. as shown. and press Enter. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. click to the left of the urinal.

(Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click to connect to the main cold water line.39 Move the cursor to the left. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 40 Click Modify. and click OK. 41 Select the top sink. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 .

44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. add a water heater.

click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand the Unassigned folder. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select the 3 sinks.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . 5 In the System Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. while pressing Ctrl. 6 In the plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Overall.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .

13 In the plan view. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 14 Click Modify.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. in the Unassigned folder. 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. as shown.6 Gallon. 15 In the System Browser. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. 10 In the System Browser. Default Domestic Hot Water. for System Name.Tankless. When designing systems. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. under Water Heater . 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and click Edit System. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). Default Domestic Cold Water. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. you edit the system to add equipment. select 0. In later steps. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.

and click the water main line. enter 10’. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. select the water heater. 26 Move the cursor to the right. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . enter 1' 6''. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 27 Click Modify. and press Enter. Slope: 0''/12''. right-click the middle left connector. and select Draw Pipe. 24 Move the cursor up. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 22 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. for Offset. 19 Select the water heater.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Offset: 4' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view.

and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 36 Move the cursor down. enter 1''. select 4'-6''. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 38 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. enter 1' 6''. and in the System Selector.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Finish Editing System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click Draw Pipe. 33 On the Edit System panel. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 35 On the Options Bar. select a sink. click Edit System. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and on the Placement Tools panel. and for Offset. and press Enter. 30 On the System Tools panel. enter 9' 0''. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

enter 2' 8''. for Offset.39 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar. and click just above the bottom sink. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . as shown. 42 Click Modify. 41 Move the cursor down. enter 1’. and press Enter.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Training Files. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this tutorial. and click Duplicate. You create a new pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this lesson. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. If the tutorial training files are not present. go to http://www. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click Standard. you can choose to save your work. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. After finishing each exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 267 . you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.

you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. Next. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. verify that 9' 0" is selected. However. you create project parameters and work with schedules. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Carbon Steel. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 9 Click OK. duct. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. for Material. For Offset. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. click Rename. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Pipe Type. For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. In the left pane. In the next exercise. For Offset. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. or architectural components. For Pipe Type. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Main. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. structural beams. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 6 In the Project Browser. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For System Type. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and click Properties. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter.

enter Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. select the upper half of the building. and then click OK. under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . For Group parameter under. Under Categories. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 In the drawing area. for Sprinkler Zone. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and click Element Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Zone 1. right-click. click Add. 5 Click OK twice. 8 Using a crossing window. the space crossing lines display. select space Instruction 221 as shown. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .Design is highlighted.

270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Zone 2. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. for Sprinkler Zone. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. including a calculated value parameter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.rvt. and then click OK. and then access instance properties. to which you add various parameters. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Sprinkler Zone. 13 Using the same method. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. select Zone 1. 10 In the Filter dialog.

■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Rounding. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Maximum Spacing. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. select Spaces. enter Maximum Spacing. double-click on each column separator. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Design is highlighted. For Type of Parameter. select To the nearest 1'. For Units. enter Light. enter 15. Select Schedule keys. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. and on the ribbon. 10 In the Format dialog. 11 Click OK twice. In the Maximum Spacing column. 6 Using the same method. 9 On the Formatting tab. for Name. click Add Parameter.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the new header. For Name. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Click OK. select Length. Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header.Fire Protection Plan . For Key name. Obstructed-Combustible. click the Formatting tab. select Feet and fractional inches. The schedule displays. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. and click Field Format. select Fire Protection.

Unobstructed Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter 130. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. enter Sprinkler Schedule.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Available fields. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. select Spaces. and press Enter. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. For Name.

select Level. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 22 Click OK twice. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Type. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 19 Click the Formatting tab. click Edit. In the Fields dialog. For Then by. select Sprinkler Zone. For Rounding. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. and click OK. Click OK. and click Field Format. select 0 decimal place. 20 On the Formatting tab.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. select Area. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Minimum Sprinklers. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. click . and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Formula. select Fixed. for Sort by. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Units. select Number. select Common. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Select Header and Blank line. For Discipline. under Other. for Sorting/Grouping.

For Then by (second instance). select Grand totals. select Level equals Level 2. select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. 27 In the drawing area. for Filter. 26 Click OK 3 times. At the bottom of the dialog. and click View Properties. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. and then click Field Format. and then select Hidden field. and select Totals only. click Edit. Under Field formatting. for Filter by. verify that Use default settings is selected. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Sprinkler Zone. For Fields. right-click the schedule. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Click OK twice. select Number.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog.

for Available fields. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and select Totals only. delete the word Maximum. double-click Type. for Fields. Under Field formatting. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Grand totals. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. select Count. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab. click Edit. and click View Properties. under Other.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and Count. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Category. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. System Name. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab.

double-click FP . Unobstructed. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 46 With the space still selected. under Identity Data. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Protection Area Construction Type. 50 Access the instance properties. 43 Click Cancel. Unobstructed.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. but their values are not determined. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click OK. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 44 In the schedule. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data.Fire Protection Plan Design. 52 Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . As a result. 48 In the floor plan. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. select Ordinary. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 In the plan view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and access the instance properties. select Ordinary. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select Light.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 279 . you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.autodesk. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you place the sprinklers. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. After finishing each exercise. As you create the system. methodology. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. If the tutorial training files are not present. However. you can choose to save your work. you will understand the process. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. By following the recommended workflow. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. At the end of this tutorial.rvt. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and double-click Level 2 .

2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 3 In the Project Browser. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When there is a small misalignment. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. After placing the initial sprinkler.

You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 11 In the drawing area. and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. 10 Press Esc twice. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. while pressing Ctrl. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and select Sprinkler . select the sprinklers that you placed.Pendent . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .

Also. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. verify that Constrain is cleared. and then press Esc. Next. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. enter 14' 6". specify a vertical offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and press Enter.FP_Ceiling view. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 23 Right-click the sprinkler. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. enter 10' 6". you adjust the offset. 200B. 19 In the floor plan. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. for Offset. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Fire Protection Plan . 29 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. move the cursor to the right. Notice that the schedule updates. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 17 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. open Design ➤ FP . and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point.Design. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. For Number. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. This number is determined in the schedule. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. enter 11. 25 Click OK. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 18 Type WT. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. under Constraints. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and 200C).

and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.rvt. In this exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. In the next exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 1 In the Project Browser.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files.Design is highlighted. and with piping (physical connection).Fire Protection Plan . A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. After creating the logical connection. However. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Unlike logical connections (systems). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.

Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 5 Right-click the header. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Creating a Piping System | 285 . The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and select Piping. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. named Fire Protection Wet. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. click View ➤ Systems. as shown. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. In the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.

press Tab. For Pipe Type. verify that 9' 0" is specified. verify that Main is selected. 15 In the drawing area. and number of elements in the system. click Settings. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and select the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. providing system editing tools. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 11 With the system still selected. indicating the logical connection. and click Select. select Branch.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. system equipment. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for System Name. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 13 In the System Browser. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Next. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. The Edit Piping System panel displays. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and a piping layout preview displays. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and on the Options Bar. select an initial piping layout. 19 Click OK. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout.Wet is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter FP Wet_Zone2. In the left pane. 12 On the Options Bar. For Offset. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.

(elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . In general. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). When the layout is finished. as shown. and green represents branch lines). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 23 For Offset. verify that Network is selected. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 22 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. select 2". The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. enter -12' 0".20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. and select solution 5. click Place Base.

First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. On the Generate Layout panel. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . A (parallel movement control) displays. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.

you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 32 If necessary.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and various manual pipe creation tools. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the Connect Into tool.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Either relocate the system components. Next. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.

3 If necessary. and select the elbow fitting as shown.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 1 In the Project Browser.

The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. verify that Network is selected. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Finish Editing System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 14 Close the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). and select solution 5. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. and pipe or duct is created. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. verify that Solutions is selected. radiators. or a system component to display system tools. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 13 Click Finish Layout. for Solution Type. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. mechanical equipment. 8 In the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 18 Click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. air terminals. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. you can select the pipe or duct. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser.

select 9'. 25 Select the sprinkler. for Offset. 28 In the drawing area. 21 In the Piping Plan. and then tile the views. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 24 In the Piping Plan.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and then press Esc. right-click. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 27 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click Draw Pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 29 Using the same method. 23 View the result in the 3D view. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.

33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. click Training Files. 4 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.rvt. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Scale. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 6 Press Esc.Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. select 4".21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

23 Close the 3D view. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. 26 Using the same method. select 1 1/4". The pipe diameter is modified. and then tag the piping as shown. 24 In the drawing area. and maximize the floor plan. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). for Diameter. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

you created a wet fire protection system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You added tags to pipes. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this tutorial. For additional practice.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this exercise. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. If the view included detail graphics. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and view references. dependent views. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Properties. and apply a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. 307 . right-click Level 1. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. matchlines. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. views and put them on the sheet. and click OK. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. more focused. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 4 Using the same method. create dependent views for areas B and C. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and then press Esc. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click OK. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Rename. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline.rvt. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 3 In the Rename View dialog. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 6 In the Project Browser. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 10 In the drawing area. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click Apply Default View Template. as shown.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. click Training Files. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale.

For Line Weight. 20 Select the upper view reference and. click the current value. Click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. for Target view. and click OK. 21 Using the same method. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. In the Color dialog. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog./ ---). select black. select 11. on the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc twice. For Line Pattern. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Double Dash 5/8". 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. and then press Esc. 19 In the drawing area.

drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and zoom to each of the view references. 25 Using the same method. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. as shown. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 27 Using the same method.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Click OK. select Plumbing Isometric. click Training Files. and click to select it. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. For Default View Template. 4 In the Project Browser. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 2 Zoom in. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. The section crop lines no longer display. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.29 Close the file with or without saving it.Domestic Water. and click Apply Default View Template. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click 3D Plumbing.rvt. and click Properties. Under Graphics. for View Classification. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Sub-Discipline. and select the section box. for View Name.Domestic Water. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. enter Plumbing Isometric . select Documentation. right-click Plumbing Isometric .

and then click OK. press Tab 3 times. 12 Using the same method. Click Apply. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.9 Right-click. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 3. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select Dash. and click to select it. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

14 Right-click. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . In the drawing area. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. press Tab 3 times. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 18 Using methods learned previously. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Right-click.Domestic Water view with detailing. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Reveal Hidden Elements.15 Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

21 Click OK twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. as shown. In the Format dialog. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. click on the Format value. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. for Rounding. and then place the callout view on a sheet. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. verify that Common is selected. For Slope. select To the nearest 1/8". When the view is associated with a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you use a plan view to create a callout view.

Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). for Scale.rvt. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. select 1/4"=1'-0''. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 5 On the Options Bar.

under Sheets (all). change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. using the same method. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. select 5. drag it to the sheet. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click M601 .8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

For Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and click Apply Default View Template. and select the viewport. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. enter WSHP PART PLAN.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. enter Typical WSHP Detail. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply View Template. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. right-click the detail view. under Names. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 In the Project Browser. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

duct tags. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. linetypes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. ■ work with model-based components. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. 321 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. symbols.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.rvt. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 8 With the text still selected. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.Creating Annotations In this exercise.

as shown. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared. and then click Right Straight.9 Press Esc twice. a segment of round duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. a return diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and a segment of rectangular duct. 16 In the drawing area. select a supply diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Creating Annotations | 323 .

24 On the Options Bar. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. for Ducts. and click OK. 17 Click Modify. 20 In the Tags dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. clear Leader. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. If necessary.rfa. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 21 In the Load Family dialog. and click Open. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. under Category. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. click Load.

Leader. Creating Annotations | 325 . 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.25 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and Attached End. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select Horizontal. 26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 34 In the drawing area. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar. as shown. for Leader.

tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and click OK. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. not simply an instance property. select the last tag placed. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style.36 Press Esc twice. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 37 In the drawing area. and all elements of that type are affected. and lock lighting fixtures. That’s because you changed a type property. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select Dot Open 1/16". Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously. for Leader Arrowhead. lay out. Creating Dimensions | 327 .

328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. and then select the interior face of the wall. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. indicating that it’s the active view. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.rvt. On the Options Bar. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. click Training Files. 12 Press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. select the dimension line. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.

linework. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. and offset them 8' from the wall. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. annotation symbols.3 1/2"). 16 Press Esc. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.13 Using the same method. and notes. 19 Using the same methods. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and press Enter. Creating a Legend | 329 . Because the dimensions are locked. enter 8'. Creating a Legend In this exercise.

Click OK.rvt. 10 Using the same method.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . click below the title to place the diffuser. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click Training Files. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area. For View. For Scale. select Floor Plan.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.8 Neck. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter Diffuser Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1/4" = 1' -0".Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 331 . annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 14 In the drawing area.

21 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP and its text note. and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 26 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.

enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.30 Select Spot Elevation . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. and then click Modify. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Creating a Legend | 333 .

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and text. indicating that it’s the active view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. 335 . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting view using detail components.Detailing 15 In this lesson. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. detail groups. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . In the left pane of the Open dialog. A detail callout that references another view.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.113 East elevation view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.

select each of the 2 panelboards. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 4 On the Options Bar. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 7 Drag the Power Riser . and click to place it. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. and then modify and align the views.113 East on the sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 8 Using the same method. Next. place Power Riser . clear Leader. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

under Identity Data. 13 Right-click. select the 113 North view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click OK. right-click. giving the appearance of a single view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and click Activate View. you add wiring to the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Using the drag control. 22 Press Esc. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. In the next exercise.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. select the 113 East elevation view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click.

and then click OK. for Name. As you draw. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Under Modify Subcategories. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). select 6. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click New. and click OK. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Chain is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area.113 North view.rvt. enter Electrical Power. for Line Weight. 9 Beginning at the transformer. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. In the Line Styles dialog. as shown. 2 Close the Project Browser. In the New Subcategory dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. notice that there are no snaps active. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . expand Lines. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 8 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

for Offset.10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 11 Using the same method. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 28 Click above the cap. 29 Click Modify. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.

31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple.

You enter exact values for each line length. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.36 Press Esc. for Offset.5. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 39 Move the cursor to the right. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 42 On the Options Bar. 40 Press Esc. and press Enter. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 0 0. enter 3/32". and then press Esc. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.

and press Enter. for Name. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Using the same method. Press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and click OK. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. while pressing Ctrl. enter Ground. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. you can ensure that they stay together. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. enter 0 0. select all 3 lines. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 47 In the drawing area.125. 46 In the Project Browser.25. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. and then press Esc. click on the length dimension value. 50 With the group selected.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. TP-2B. 52 Select the detail group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 54 Select the group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.51 Using the method learned previously.

4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Rename. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. 5 Zoom in to view the section. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment.rvt. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In later exercises.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. and will place it on sheet E01. 2 Right-click the copy. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. click Training Files. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Home.6 Select the section box. and then press Esc. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 7 On the ViewCube. Back. and then click the corner where the Top.

Under Names.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3D HVAC Iso. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D Views. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. right-click. and click Apply View Template. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Walkthroughs. Click OK.

and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 19 Complete the text labels. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Typical. Move the cursor down and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. (Right). 15 Using the same method.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.

23 Click on the crop region. and under Extents. as shown. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop Region Visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 25 Click OK. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and then click OK. under Extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.To rotate and reposition a text label. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display.

and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3" = 1'-0". By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.rvt. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. right-click the view name. Place a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. For Scale. select the isometric view. Click OK. click Training Files. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser.29 In the drawing area.

for Sub-Discipline. For View Classification. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 12 On the Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. click the point at the top of the drain. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 9 Zoom in to the component. Click OK. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 13 In the drawing area. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Plumbing. select Documentation. as the rectangle start point. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. select the filled region. 20 Select 1. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 18 With the filled region still selected. Concrete. (Line). click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. select C. 22 Click Modify. and then press Esc. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.P. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 21 In the drawing area. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.I. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. for Type. and click OK. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.

34 Press Esc. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.

as shown.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then press Esc. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle). 45 Using the method learned previously. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .

press Tab to highlight the chain.. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. for Name.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.D. and click OK. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 52 In the Create Group dialog. draw wide detail lines as shown. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. and then click to select them. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. enter Flashing Membrane_F. select the Flashing Membrane group. as shown. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 49 Click Modify.

57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown.

and then click OK. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 67 On the Options Bar. 72 If necessary. 71 Click Modify. 64 Press Esc twice. as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. and use the grips to resize the masking region.62 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select Leader and Free End.

and click to specify the text insertion point.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 81 Select the text note. 76 To select the leader start point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 78 Move the cursor to the left. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the second leader point. 80 Press Esc twice.

as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 90 Press Esc. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 88 In the drawing area. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.

dwg. select 3. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. For A-----NPP. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Line Weight. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. you import a CAD detail drawing.rvt. Click Open. For Layers. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Colors. click Training Files. select Black and White. select Auto-Detect. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Import units. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select Visible. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Click OK.

and then press Esc. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the viewport title. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.8 Type ZF. 11 Press Esc. open P103 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 12 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

366 .